• Home
  • Line#
  • Scopes#
  • Navigate#
  • Raw
  • Download
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2021 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <linux/android_kabi.h>
22 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
23 #include <net/codel.h>
24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
25 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
26 
27 /**
28  * DOC: Introduction
29  *
30  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33  * drivers.
34  */
35 
36 /**
37  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38  *
39  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
40  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
43  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44  * tasklet function.
45  *
46  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
47  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
48  */
49 
50 /**
51  * DOC: Warning
52  *
53  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55  */
56 
57 /**
58  * DOC: Frame format
59  *
60  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63  * hardware.
64  *
65  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66  *
67  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69  *
70  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
72  */
73 
74 /**
75  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76  *
77  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81  *
82  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83  * suspend.
84  *
85  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86  *
87  */
88 
89 /**
90  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91  *
92  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94  * between different stations/interfaces.
95  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98  *
99  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100  * driver operation.
101  *
102  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
103  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
104  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
105  *
106  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
107  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
108  *
109  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
110  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
111  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
112  *
113  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
114  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
115  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
116  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
117  * ieee80211_return_txq().
118  *
119  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
120  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
121  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
122  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
123  * .release_buffered_frames().
124  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
125  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
126  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
127  */
128 
129 struct device;
130 
131 /**
132  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
133  *
134  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
135  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
136  */
137 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
138 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
139 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
140 };
141 
142 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
143 
144 /**
145  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
146  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
147  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
149  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
150  */
151 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
152 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
153 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
154 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
155 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
156 };
157 
158 /**
159  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
160  *
161  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
162  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
163  *
164  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
165  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
166  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
167  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
168  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
169  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
170  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
171  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
172  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
173  */
174 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
175 	u16 txop;
176 	u16 cw_min;
177 	u16 cw_max;
178 	u8 aifs;
179 	bool acm;
180 	bool uapsd;
181 	bool mu_edca;
182 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
183 };
184 
185 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
186 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
187 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
188 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
189 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
190 };
191 
192 /**
193  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
194  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
195  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
197  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
198  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
199  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
200  */
201 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
202 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
203 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
206 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
207 };
208 
209 /**
210  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
211  *
212  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
213  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
214  *
215  * @def: the channel definition
216  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
217  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
218  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
219  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
220  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
221  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
222  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
223  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
224  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
225  */
226 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
227 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
228 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
229 
230 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
231 
232 	bool radar_enabled;
233 
234 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
235 };
236 
237 /**
238  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
239  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
240  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
241  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
242  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
243  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
244  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
245  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
246  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
247  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
248  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
249  *      for changes/removal.)
250  */
251 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
252 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
253 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
254 };
255 
256 /**
257  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
258  *
259  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
260  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
261  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
262  * done.
263  *
264  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
265  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
266  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
267  */
268 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
269 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
270 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
271 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
272 };
273 
274 /**
275  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
276  *
277  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
278  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
279  *
280  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
281  *	also implies a change in the AID.
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
283  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
288  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
289  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
290  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
291  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
292  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
293  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
295  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
297  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
298  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
304  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
305  *	changed
306  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
307  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
308  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
309  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
310  *	context had been assigned.
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
313  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
314  *	keep alive) changed.
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
316  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
317  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
319  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
320  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
321  * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
322  * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
323  *	status changed.
324  *
325  */
326 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
327 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
352 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
353 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
354 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
355 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
356 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
357 	BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY      = 1<<30,
358 	BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
359 
360 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
361 };
362 
363 /*
364  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
365  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
366  * filtering will be disabled.
367  */
368 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
369 
370 /**
371  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
372  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
373  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
374  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
375  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
376  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
377  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
378  */
379 enum ieee80211_event_type {
380 	RSSI_EVENT,
381 	MLME_EVENT,
382 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
383 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
384 };
385 
386 /**
387  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
388  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
389  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
390  */
391 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
392 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
393 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
394 };
395 
396 /**
397  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
398  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
399  */
400 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
401 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
402 };
403 
404 /**
405  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
406  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
407  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
408  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
409  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
410  */
411 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
412 	AUTH_EVENT,
413 	ASSOC_EVENT,
414 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
415 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
416 };
417 
418 /**
419  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
420  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
421  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
422  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
423  */
424 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
425 	MLME_SUCCESS,
426 	MLME_DENIED,
427 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
428 };
429 
430 /**
431  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
432  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
433  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
434  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
435  */
436 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
437 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
438 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
439 	u16 reason;
440 };
441 
442 /**
443  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
444  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
445  * @tid: the tid
446  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
447  */
448 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
449 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
450 	u16 tid;
451 	u16 ssn;
452 };
453 
454 /**
455  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
456  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
457  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
458  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
459  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
460  * @u:union holding the fields above
461  */
462 struct ieee80211_event {
463 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
464 	union {
465 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
466 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
467 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
468 	} u;
469 };
470 
471 /**
472  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
473  *
474  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
475  *
476  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
477  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
478  */
479 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
480 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
481 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
482 };
483 
484 /**
485  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
486  *
487  * @lci: LCI subelement content
488  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
489  * @lci_len: LCI data length
490  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
491  */
492 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
493 	const u8 *lci;
494 	const u8 *civicloc;
495 	size_t lci_len;
496 	size_t civicloc_len;
497 };
498 
499 /**
500  * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
501  * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
502  *
503  * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
504  * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
505  */
506 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
507 	u32 min_interval;
508 	u32 max_interval;
509 };
510 
511 /**
512  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
513  *
514  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
515  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
516  *
517  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
518  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
519  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
520  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
521  *	ACK, BACK or both
522  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
523  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
524  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
525  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
526  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
527  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
528  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
529  * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
530  * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
531  * @assoc: association status
532  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
533  *	or not
534  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
535  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
536  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
537  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
538  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
539  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
540  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
541  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
542  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
543  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
544  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
545  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
546  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
547  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
548  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
549  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
550  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
551  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
552  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
553  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
554  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
555  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
556  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
557  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
558  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
559  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
560  *	the current band.
561  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
562  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
563  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
564  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
565  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
566  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
567  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
568  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
569  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
570  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
571  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
572  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
573  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
574  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
575  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
576  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
577  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
578  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
579  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
580  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
581  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
582  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
583  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
584  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
585  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
586  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
587  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
588  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
589  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
590  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
591  *	your driver/device needs to do.
592  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
593  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
594  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
595  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
596  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
597  * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
598  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
599  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
600  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
601  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
602  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
603  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
604  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
605  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
606  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
607  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
608  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
609  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
610  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
611  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
612  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
613  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
614  *	station.
615  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
616  *	responder functionality.
617  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
618  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
619  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
620  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
621  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
622  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
623  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
624  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
625  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
626  * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
627  *	connected to (STA)
628  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
629  * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
630  * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
631  * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
632  *	interval.
633  * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
634  * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
635  *	to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
636  */
637 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
638 	const u8 *bssid;
639 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
640 	bool uora_exists;
641 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
642 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
643 	bool he_support;
644 	bool twt_requester;
645 	bool twt_responder;
646 	bool twt_protected;
647 	bool twt_broadcast;
648 	/* association related data */
649 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
650 	bool ibss_creator;
651 	u16 aid;
652 	/* erp related data */
653 	bool use_cts_prot;
654 	bool use_short_preamble;
655 	bool use_short_slot;
656 	bool enable_beacon;
657 	u8 dtim_period;
658 	u16 beacon_int;
659 	u16 assoc_capability;
660 	u64 sync_tsf;
661 	u32 sync_device_ts;
662 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
663 	u32 basic_rates;
664 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
665 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
666 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
667 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
668 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
669 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
670 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
671 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
672 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
673 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
674 	int arp_addr_cnt;
675 	bool qos;
676 	bool idle;
677 	bool ps;
678 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
679 	size_t ssid_len;
680 	bool hidden_ssid;
681 	int txpower;
682 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
683 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
684 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
685 	u16 max_idle_period;
686 	bool protected_keep_alive;
687 	bool ftm_responder;
688 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
689 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
690 	bool nontransmitted;
691 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
692 	u8 bssid_index;
693 	u8 bssid_indicator;
694 	bool ema_ap;
695 	u8 profile_periodicity;
696 	struct {
697 		u32 params;
698 		u16 nss_set;
699 	} he_oper;
700 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
701 	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
702 	struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
703 	u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
704 	bool s1g;
705 	struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
706 
707 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
708 };
709 
710 /**
711  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
712  *
713  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
714  *
715  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
716  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
717  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
718  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
719  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
720  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
721  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
722  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
723  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
724  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
725  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
726  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
727  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
728  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
729  *	station
730  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
731  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
732  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
733  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
734  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
735  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
736  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
737  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
738  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
739  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
740  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
741  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
742  *	hardware queue.
743  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
744  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
745  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
746  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
747  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
748  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
749  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
750  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
751  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
752  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
753  *	off-channel operation.
754  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
755  *	(header conversion)
756  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
757  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
758  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
759  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
760  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
761  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
762  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
763  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
764  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
765  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
766  *	queue gets full.
767  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
768  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
769  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
770  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
771  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
772  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
773  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
774  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
775  *	status to user space)
776  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
777  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
778  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
779  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
780  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
781  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
782  *	handled properly by the device.
783  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
784  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
785  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
786  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
787  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
788  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
789  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
790  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
791  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
792  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
793  *	PS-Poll responses.
794  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
795  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
796  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
797  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
798  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
799  *	monitor injection).
800  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
801  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
802  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
803  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
804  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
805  *
806  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
807  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
808  */
809 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
810 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
811 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
812 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
813 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
814 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
815 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
816 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
817 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
818 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
819 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
820 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
821 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
822 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
823 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
824 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP		= BIT(14),
825 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
826 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
827 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
828 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
829 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
830 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
831 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
832 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
833 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
834 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
835 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
836 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
837 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
838 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
839 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
840 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
841 };
842 
843 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
844 
845 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
846 
847 /**
848  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
849  *
850  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
851  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
852  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
853  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
854  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
855  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
856  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
857  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
858  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
859  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
860  *	it can be sent out.
861  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
862  *	has already been assigned to this frame.
863  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
864  *	relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
865  *	of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
866  *
867  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
868  */
869 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
870 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
871 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
872 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
873 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
874 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
875 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
876 	IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(6),
877 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO		= BIT(7),
878 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER		= BIT(8),
879 };
880 
881 /*
882  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
883  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
884  */
885 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
886 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
887 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
888 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
889 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
890 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
891 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
892 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
893 
894 /**
895  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
896  *	Rate Control algorithm.
897  *
898  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
899  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
900  *
901  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
902  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
903  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
904  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
905  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
906  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
907  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
908  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
909  *	Greenfield mode.
910  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
911  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
912  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
913  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
914  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
915  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
916  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
917  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
918  */
919 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
920 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
921 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
922 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
923 
924 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
925 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
926 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
927 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
928 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
929 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
930 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
931 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
932 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
933 };
934 
935 
936 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
937 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
938 
939 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
940 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
941 
942 /* maximum number of rate stages */
943 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
944 
945 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
946 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
947 
948 /**
949  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
950  *
951  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
952  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
953  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
954  *
955  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
956  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
957  *
958  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
959  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
960  *
961  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
962  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
963  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
964  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
965  * information::
966  *
967  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
968  *
969  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
970  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
971  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
972  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
973  * information should then contain::
974  *
975  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
976  *
977  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
978  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
979  */
980 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
981 	s8 idx;
982 	u16 count:5,
983 	    flags:11;
984 } __packed;
985 
986 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
987 
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)988 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
989 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
990 {
991 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
992 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
993 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
994 }
995 
996 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)997 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
998 {
999 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
1000 }
1001 
1002 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1003 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1004 {
1005 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1006 }
1007 
1008 /**
1009  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1010  *
1011  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1012  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1013  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1014  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1015  *
1016  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1017  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
1018  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1019  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1020  * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1021  * @control: union part for control data
1022  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1023  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1024  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1025  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1026  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1027  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1028  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1029  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1030  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1031  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1032  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1033  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1034  * @pad: padding
1035  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1036  * @status: union part for status data
1037  * @status.rates: attempted rates
1038  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1039  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1040  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1041  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1042  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1043  *	used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1044  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1045  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1046  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1047  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1048  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1049  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1050  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1051  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1052  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1053  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1054  */
1055 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1056 	/* common information */
1057 	u32 flags;
1058 	u32 band:3,
1059 	    ack_frame_id:13,
1060 	    hw_queue:4,
1061 	    tx_time_est:10;
1062 	/* 2 free bits */
1063 
1064 	union {
1065 		struct {
1066 			union {
1067 				/* rate control */
1068 				struct {
1069 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1070 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1071 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1072 					u8 use_rts:1;
1073 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1074 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1075 					u8 skip_table:1;
1076 					/* 2 bytes free */
1077 				};
1078 				/* only needed before rate control */
1079 				unsigned long jiffies;
1080 			};
1081 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1082 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1083 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1084 			u32 flags;
1085 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1086 		} control;
1087 		struct {
1088 			u64 cookie;
1089 		} ack;
1090 		struct {
1091 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1092 			s32 ack_signal;
1093 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1094 			u8 ampdu_len;
1095 			u8 antenna;
1096 			u16 tx_time;
1097 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1098 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1099 		} status;
1100 		struct {
1101 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1102 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1103 			u8 pad[4];
1104 
1105 			void *rate_driver_data[
1106 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1107 		};
1108 
1109 		ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1110 
1111 		void *driver_data[
1112 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1113 	};
1114 };
1115 
1116 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info,u16 tx_time_est)1117 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1118 {
1119 	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1120 	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1121 	 */
1122 	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1123 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1124 }
1125 
1126 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1127 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1128 {
1129 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1130 }
1131 
1132 /**
1133  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1134  *
1135  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1136  * @info: Basic tx status information
1137  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1138  * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1139  * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1140  */
1141 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1142 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1143 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1144 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1145 	struct rate_info *rate;
1146 	struct list_head *free_list;
1147 };
1148 
1149 /**
1150  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1151  *
1152  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1153  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1154  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1155  *
1156  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1157  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1158  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1159  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1160  */
1161 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1162 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1163 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1164 	const u8 *common_ies;
1165 	size_t common_ie_len;
1166 };
1167 
1168 
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1169 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1170 {
1171 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1172 }
1173 
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1174 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1175 {
1176 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1177 }
1178 
1179 /**
1180  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1181  *
1182  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1183  *
1184  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1185  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1186  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1187  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1188  *
1189  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1190  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1191  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1192  */
1193 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1194 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1195 {
1196 	int i;
1197 
1198 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1199 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1200 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1201 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1202 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1203 	/* clear the rate counts */
1204 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1205 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1206 
1207 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1208 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1209 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1210 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1211 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1212 }
1213 
1214 
1215 /**
1216  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1217  *
1218  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1219  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1220  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1221  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1222  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1223  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1224  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1225  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1226  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1227  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1228  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1229  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1230  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1231  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1232  *	de-duplication by itself.
1233  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1234  *	the frame.
1235  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1236  *	the frame.
1237  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1238  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1239  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1240  *	merging.
1241  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1242  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1243  *	(including FCS) was received.
1244  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1245  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1246  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1247  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1248  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1249  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1250  *	each A-MPDU
1251  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1252  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1253  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1254  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1255  *	on this subframe
1256  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1257  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1258  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1259  *	done by the hardware
1260  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1261  *	processing it in any regular way.
1262  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1263  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1264  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1265  *	monitor interfaces.
1266  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1267  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1268  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1269  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1270  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1271  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1272  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1273  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1274  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1275  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1276  *	interleaved with other frames.
1277  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1278  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1279  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1280  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1281  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1282  *	the first subframe.
1283  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1284  *	be done in the hardware.
1285  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1286  *	frame
1287  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1288  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1289  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1290  *
1291  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1292  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1293  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1294  *	 - DATA5_GI
1295  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1296  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1297  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1298  *
1299  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1300  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1301  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1302  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1303  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1304  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1305  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1306  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1307  * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1308  *	hardware or driver)
1309  */
1310 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1311 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1312 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1313 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1314 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1315 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1316 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1317 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1318 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1319 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1320 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1321 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1322 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1323 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1324 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1325 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1326 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1327 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1328 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1329 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1330 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1331 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1332 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1333 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1334 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1335 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1336 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1337 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1338 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1339 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1340 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1341 	RX_FLAG_8023			= BIT(30),
1342 };
1343 
1344 /**
1345  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1346  *
1347  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1348  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1349  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1350  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1351  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1352  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1353  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1354  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1355  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1356  */
1357 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1358 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1359 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1360 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1361 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1362 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1363 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1364 };
1365 
1366 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1367 
1368 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1369 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1370 	RX_ENC_HT,
1371 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1372 	RX_ENC_HE,
1373 };
1374 
1375 /**
1376  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1377  *
1378  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1379  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1380  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1381  *
1382  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1383  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1384  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1385  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1386  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1387  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1388  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1389  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1390  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1391  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1392  * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1393  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1394  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1395  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1396  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1397  *	values were filled.
1398  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1399  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1400  * @antenna: antenna used
1401  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1402  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1403  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1404  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1405  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1406  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1407  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1408  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1409  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1410  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1411  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1412  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1413  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1414  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1415  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1416  */
1417 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1418 	u64 mactime;
1419 	u64 boottime_ns;
1420 	u32 device_timestamp;
1421 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1422 	u32 flag;
1423 	u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1424 	u8 enc_flags;
1425 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1426 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1427 	u8 rate_idx;
1428 	u8 nss;
1429 	u8 rx_flags;
1430 	u8 band;
1431 	u8 antenna;
1432 	s8 signal;
1433 	u8 chains;
1434 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1435 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1436 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1437 };
1438 
1439 static inline u32
ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status * rx_status)1440 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1441 {
1442 	return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1443 	       (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1444 }
1445 
1446 /**
1447  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1448  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1449  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1450  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1451  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1452  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1453  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1454  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1455  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1456  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1457  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1458  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1459  *	@data field.
1460  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1461  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1462  *	length
1463  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1464  *
1465  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1466  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1467  * data.
1468  */
1469 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1470 	u32 present;
1471 	u8 align;
1472 	u8 oui[3];
1473 	u8 subns;
1474 	u8 pad;
1475 	u16 len;
1476 	u8 data[];
1477 } __packed;
1478 
1479 /**
1480  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1481  *
1482  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1483  *
1484  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1485  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1486  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1487  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1488  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1489  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1490  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1491  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1492  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1493  *	for more.
1494  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1495  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1496  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1497  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1498  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1499  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1500  *	operating channel.
1501  */
1502 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1503 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1504 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1505 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1506 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1507 };
1508 
1509 
1510 /**
1511  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1512  *
1513  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1514  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1515  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1516  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1517  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1518  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1519  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1520  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1521  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1522  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1523  */
1524 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1525 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1526 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1527 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1528 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1529 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1530 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1531 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1532 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1533 };
1534 
1535 /**
1536  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1537  *
1538  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1539  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1540  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1541  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1542  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1543  */
1544 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1545 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1546 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1547 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1548 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1549 
1550 	/* keep last */
1551 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1552 };
1553 
1554 /**
1555  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1556  *
1557  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1558  *
1559  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1560  *
1561  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1562  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1563  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1564  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1565  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1566  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1567  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1568  *
1569  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1570  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1571  *
1572  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1573  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1574  *
1575  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1576  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1577  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1578  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1579  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1580  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1581  *
1582  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1583  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1584  *	configured for an HT channel.
1585  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1586  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1587  */
1588 struct ieee80211_conf {
1589 	u32 flags;
1590 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1591 
1592 	u16 listen_interval;
1593 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1594 
1595 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1596 
1597 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1598 	bool radar_enabled;
1599 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1600 
1601 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1602 };
1603 
1604 /**
1605  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1606  *
1607  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1608  * operation.
1609  *
1610  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1611  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1612  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1613  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1614  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1615  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1616  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1617  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1618  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1619  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1620  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1621   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1622   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1623  */
1624 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1625 	u64 timestamp;
1626 	u32 device_timestamp;
1627 	bool block_tx;
1628 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1629 	u8 count;
1630 	u32 delay;
1631 };
1632 
1633 /**
1634  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1635  *
1636  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1637  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1638  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1639  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1640  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1641  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1642  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1643  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1644  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1645  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1646  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1647  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1648  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1649  */
1650 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1651 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1652 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1653 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1654 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1655 };
1656 
1657 
1658 /**
1659  * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1660  *
1661  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1662  *	The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1663  *	It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1664  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1665  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1666  *	The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1667  *	mac80211.
1668  */
1669 
1670 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1671 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED		= BIT(0),
1672 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR		= BIT(1),
1673 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED		= BIT(2),
1674 };
1675 
1676 /**
1677  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1678  *
1679  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1680  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1681  *
1682  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1683  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1684  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1685  * @addr: address of this interface
1686  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1687  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1688  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1689  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1690  *	for read access.
1691  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1692  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1693  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1694  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1695  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1696  * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1697  *	These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1698  *	.change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1699  *	within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1700  *	restrictions.
1701  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1702  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1703  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1704  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1705  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1706  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1707  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1708  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1709  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1710  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1711  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1712  *	interface.
1713  * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1714  *	for this interface.
1715  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1716  *	sizeof(void \*).
1717  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1718  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1719  *	protected by fq->lock.
1720  * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1721  *	&enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1722  * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is
1723  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1724  *	for read access.
1725  * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
1726  */
1727 struct ieee80211_vif {
1728 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1729 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1730 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1731 	bool p2p;
1732 	bool csa_active;
1733 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1734 
1735 	u8 cab_queue;
1736 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1737 
1738 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1739 
1740 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1741 
1742 	u32 driver_flags;
1743 	u32 offload_flags;
1744 
1745 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1746 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1747 #endif
1748 
1749 	bool probe_req_reg;
1750 	bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1751 
1752 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1753 
1754 	bool color_change_active;
1755 	u8 color_change_color;
1756 
1757 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1758 
1759 	/* must be last */
1760 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1761 };
1762 
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1763 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1764 {
1765 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1766 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1767 #endif
1768 	return false;
1769 }
1770 
1771 /**
1772  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1773  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1774  *
1775  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1776  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1777  *
1778  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1779  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1780  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1781  */
1782 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1783 
1784 /**
1785  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1786  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1787  *
1788  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1789  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1790  * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1791  */
1792 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1793 
1794 /**
1795  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1796  *
1797  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1798  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1799  *
1800  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1801  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1802  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1803  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1804  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1805  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1806  *	generation in software.
1807  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1808  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1809  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1810  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1811  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1812  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1813  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1814  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1815  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1816  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1817  *	MIC.
1818  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1819  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1820  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1821  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1822  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1823  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1824  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1825  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1826  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1827  *	only for management frames (MFP).
1828  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1829  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1830  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1831  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1832  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1833  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1834  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1835  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1836  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1837  *	generation only
1838  */
1839 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1840 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1841 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1842 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1843 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1844 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1845 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1846 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1847 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1848 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1849 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1850 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1851 };
1852 
1853 /**
1854  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1855  *
1856  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1857  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1858  *
1859  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1860  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1861  *	encrypted in hardware.
1862  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1863  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1864  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1865  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1866  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1867  * @keylen: key material length
1868  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1869  * 	data block:
1870  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1871  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1872  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1873  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1874  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1875  */
1876 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1877 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1878 	u32 cipher;
1879 	u8 icv_len;
1880 	u8 iv_len;
1881 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1882 	s8 keyidx;
1883 	u16 flags;
1884 	u8 keylen;
1885 	u8 key[];
1886 };
1887 
1888 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1889 
1890 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1891 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1892 
1893 /**
1894  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1895  *
1896  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1897  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1898  *	reverse order than in packet)
1899  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1900  *	reverse order than in packet)
1901  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1902  *	reverse order than in packet)
1903  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1904  *	reverse order than in packet)
1905  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1906  */
1907 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1908 	union {
1909 		struct {
1910 			u32 iv32;
1911 			u16 iv16;
1912 		} tkip;
1913 		struct {
1914 			u8 pn[6];
1915 		} ccmp;
1916 		struct {
1917 			u8 pn[6];
1918 		} aes_cmac;
1919 		struct {
1920 			u8 pn[6];
1921 		} aes_gmac;
1922 		struct {
1923 			u8 pn[6];
1924 		} gcmp;
1925 		struct {
1926 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1927 			u8 seq_len;
1928 		} hw;
1929 	};
1930 };
1931 
1932 /**
1933  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1934  *
1935  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1936  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1937  *
1938  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1939  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1940  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1941  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1942  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1943  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1944  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1945  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1946  *     key_idx value calculation:
1947  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1948  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1949  */
1950 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1951 	u32 cipher;
1952 	u16 iftype;
1953 	u8 hdr_len;
1954 	u8 pn_len;
1955 	u8 pn_off;
1956 	u8 key_idx_off;
1957 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1958 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1959 	u8 mic_len;
1960 };
1961 
1962 /**
1963  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1964  *
1965  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1966  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1967  *
1968  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1969  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1970  */
1971 enum set_key_cmd {
1972 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1973 };
1974 
1975 /**
1976  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1977  *
1978  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1979  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1980  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1981  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1982  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1983  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1984  */
1985 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1986 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1987 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1988 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1989 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1990 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1991 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1992 };
1993 
1994 /**
1995  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1996  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1997  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1998  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1999  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
2000  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
2001  *
2002  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
2003  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
2004  */
2005 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
2006 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
2007 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
2008 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
2009 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2010 };
2011 
2012 /**
2013  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2014  *
2015  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2016  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2017  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2018  */
2019 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2020 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2021 	struct {
2022 		s8 idx;
2023 		u8 count;
2024 		u8 count_cts;
2025 		u8 count_rts;
2026 		u16 flags;
2027 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2028 };
2029 
2030 /**
2031  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2032  *
2033  * Used to configure txpower for station.
2034  *
2035  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2036  *	to the STA.
2037  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2038  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2039  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2040  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2041  *	per peer TPC.
2042  */
2043 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2044 	s16 power;
2045 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2046 };
2047 
2048 #define MAX_STA_LINKS			15
2049 
2050 /**
2051  * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info
2052  * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single)
2053  * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here.
2054  *
2055  * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr
2056  *	in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different
2057  *	from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr)
2058  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates
2059  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2060  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2061  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2062  * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2063  * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA
2064  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2065  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2066  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2067  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2068  *	the station moves to associated state.
2069  * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2070  *
2071  */
2072 struct ieee80211_link_sta {
2073 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2074 
2075 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2076 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2077 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2078 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2079 	struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2080 	struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap;
2081 
2082 	u8 rx_nss;
2083 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2084 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2085 };
2086 
2087 /**
2088  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2089  *
2090  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2091  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2092  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2093  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2094  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2095  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2096  * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association
2097  * and holds pointers to various link STA's
2098  *
2099  * @addr: MAC address
2100  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2101  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2102  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2103  *	Can be modified by driver.
2104  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2105  *	otherwise always false)
2106  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2107  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2108  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2109  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2110  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2111  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2112  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2113  * @rates: rate control selection table
2114  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2115  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2116  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2117  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2118  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2119  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2120  *	unlimited.
2121  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2122  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2123  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2124  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2125  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2126  * @multi_link_sta: Identifies if this sta is a MLD STA
2127  * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link
2128  *	specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through
2129  *	link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA
2130  *	the first added link STA will point to deflink.
2131  * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link,
2132  *	i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and
2133  *	would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO
2134  *	STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to
2135  *	@deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address
2136  *	would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned
2137  *	by the AP.
2138  */
2139 struct ieee80211_sta {
2140 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2141 	u16 aid;
2142 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2143 	bool wme;
2144 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2145 	u8 max_sp;
2146 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2147 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2148 	bool tdls;
2149 	bool tdls_initiator;
2150 	bool mfp;
2151 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2152 
2153 	/**
2154 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
2155 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2156 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2157 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2158 	 *
2159 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2160 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2161 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2162 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2163 	 *
2164 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2165 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2166 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2167 	 */
2168 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2169 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2170 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2171 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2172 
2173 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2174 
2175 	bool multi_link_sta;
2176 	struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink;
2177 	struct ieee80211_link_sta *link[MAX_STA_LINKS];
2178 
2179 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
2180 
2181 	/* must be last */
2182 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2183 };
2184 
2185 /**
2186  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2187  *
2188  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2189  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2190  *
2191  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2192  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2193  */
2194 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2195 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2196 };
2197 
2198 /**
2199  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2200  *
2201  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2202  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2203  */
2204 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2205 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2206 };
2207 
2208 /**
2209  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2210  *
2211  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2212  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2213  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2214  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2215  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2216  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2217  *
2218  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2219  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2220  */
2221 struct ieee80211_txq {
2222 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2223 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2224 	u8 tid;
2225 	u8 ac;
2226 
2227 	/* must be last */
2228 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2229 };
2230 
2231 /**
2232  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2233  *
2234  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2235  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2236  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2237  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2238  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2239  *
2240  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2241  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2242  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2243  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2244  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2245  *	algorithm.
2246  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2247  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2248  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2249  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2250  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2251  *	CCK frames.
2252  *
2253  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2254  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2255  *	the FCS at the end.
2256  *
2257  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2258  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2259  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2260  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2261  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2262  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2263  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2264  *
2265  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2266  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2267  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2268  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2269  *
2270  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2271  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2272  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2273  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2274  *
2275  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2276  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2277  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2278  *
2279  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2280  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2281  *
2282  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2283  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2284  *
2285  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2286  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2287  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2288  *
2289  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2290  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2291  *
2292  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2293  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2294  *
2295  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2296  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2297  *	the stack.
2298  *
2299  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2300  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2301  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2302  *
2303  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2304  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2305  *	dtim_period).
2306  *
2307  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2308  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2309  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2310  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2311  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2312  *	only in that case.
2313  *
2314  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2315  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2316  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2317  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2318  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2319  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2320  *
2321  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2322  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2323  *	software.
2324  *
2325  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2326  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2327  *	active interfaces.
2328  *
2329  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2330  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2331  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2332  *
2333  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2334  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2335  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2336  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2337  *	supported cipher suites.
2338  *
2339  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2340  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2341  *	for frames.
2342  *
2343  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2344  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2345  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2346  *	control for more details.
2347  *
2348  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2349  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2350  *
2351  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2352  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2353  *	is supported.
2354  *
2355  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2356  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2357  *
2358  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2359  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2360  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2361  *
2362  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2363  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2364  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2365  *	CSA frame.
2366  *
2367  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2368  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2369  *
2370  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2371  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2372  *
2373  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2374  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2375  *
2376  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2377  *	within A-MPDU.
2378  *
2379  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2380  *	for sent beacons.
2381  *
2382  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2383  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2384  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2385  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2386  *
2387  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2388  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2389  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2390  *	timeout.
2391  *
2392  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2393  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2394  *
2395  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2396  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2397  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2398  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2399  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2400  *
2401  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2402  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2403  *
2404  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2405  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2406  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2407  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2408  *
2409  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2410  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2411  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2412  *
2413  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2414  *	TDLS links.
2415  *
2416  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2417  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2418  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2419  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2420  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2421  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2422  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2423  *
2424  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2425  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2426  *
2427  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2428  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2429  *
2430  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2431  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2432  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2433  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2434  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2435  *
2436  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2437  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2438  *	TXQs to start with.
2439  *
2440  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2441  *	length in tx status information
2442  *
2443  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2444  *
2445  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2446  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2447  *
2448  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2449  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2450  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2451  *
2452  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2453  *	offload
2454  *
2455  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2456  *	offload
2457  *
2458  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2459  *	decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2460  *	If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2461  *	usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2462  *	the stack.
2463  *
2464  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2465  */
2466 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2467 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2468 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2469 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2470 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2471 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2472 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2473 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2474 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2475 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2476 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2477 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2478 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2479 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2480 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2481 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2482 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2483 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2484 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2485 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2486 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2487 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2488 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2489 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2490 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2491 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2492 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2493 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2494 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2495 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2496 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2497 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2498 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2499 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2500 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2501 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2502 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2503 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2504 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2505 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2506 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2507 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2508 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2509 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2510 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2511 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2512 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2513 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2514 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2515 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2516 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2517 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2518 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2519 
2520 	/* keep last, obviously */
2521 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2522 };
2523 
2524 /**
2525  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2526  *
2527  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2528  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2529  *
2530  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2531  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2532  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2533  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2534  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2535  *
2536  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2537  *
2538  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2539  *	along with this structure.
2540  *
2541  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2542  *
2543  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2544  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2545  *
2546  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2547  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2548  *
2549  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2550  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2551  *
2552  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2553  *	that HW supports
2554  *
2555  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2556  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2557  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2558  *
2559  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2560  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2561  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2562  *
2563  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2564  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2565  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2566  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2567  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2568  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2569  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2570  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2571  *
2572  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2573  *	can handle.
2574  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2575  *	the hw can report back.
2576  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2577  *
2578  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2579  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2580  *	aggregation.
2581  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2582  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2583  *	it shouldn't be set.
2584  *
2585  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2586  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2587  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2588  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2589  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2590  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2591  *
2592  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2593  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2594  *
2595  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2596  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2597  *
2598  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2599  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2600  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2601  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2602  *
2603  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2604  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2605  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2606  *
2607  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2608  *
2609  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2610  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2611  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2612  *	device_timestamp.
2613  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2614  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2615  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2616  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2617  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2618  *
2619  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2620  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2621  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2622  *
2623  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2624  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2625  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2626  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2627  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2628  *	neither enabled.
2629  *
2630  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2631  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2632  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2633  *
2634  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2635  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2636  *	supported by HW.
2637  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2638  *	device.
2639  *
2640  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2641  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2642  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2643  *
2644  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2645  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2646  *
2647  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2648  */
2649 struct ieee80211_hw {
2650 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2651 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2652 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2653 	void *priv;
2654 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2655 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2656 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2657 	int vif_data_size;
2658 	int sta_data_size;
2659 	int chanctx_data_size;
2660 	int txq_data_size;
2661 	u16 queues;
2662 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2663 	s8 max_signal;
2664 	u8 max_rates;
2665 	u8 max_report_rates;
2666 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2667 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2668 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2669 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2670 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2671 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2672 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2673 	struct {
2674 		int units_pos;
2675 		s16 accuracy;
2676 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2677 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2678 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2679 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2680 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2681 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2682 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2683 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2684 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2685 	u32 max_mtu;
2686 
2687 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
2688 };
2689 
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2690 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2691 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2692 {
2693 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2694 }
2695 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2696 
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2697 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2698 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2699 {
2700 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2701 }
2702 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2703 
2704 /**
2705  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2706  *
2707  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2708  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2709  */
2710 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2711 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2712 
2713 	/* Keep last */
2714 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2715 };
2716 
2717 /**
2718  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2719  *
2720  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2721  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2722  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2723  * @status: channel-switch response status
2724  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2725  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2726  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2727  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2728  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2729  */
2730 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2731 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2732 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2733 	u8 action_code;
2734 	u32 status;
2735 	u32 timestamp;
2736 	u16 switch_time;
2737 	u16 switch_timeout;
2738 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2739 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2740 };
2741 
2742 /**
2743  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2744  *
2745  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2746  *
2747  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2748  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2749  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2750  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2751  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2752  *
2753  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2754  */
2755 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2756 
2757 /**
2758  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2759  *
2760  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2761  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2762  */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2763 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2764 {
2765 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2766 }
2767 
2768 /**
2769  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2770  *
2771  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2772  * @addr: the address to set
2773  */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2774 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2775 {
2776 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2777 }
2778 
2779 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2780 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2781 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2782 {
2783 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2784 		return NULL;
2785 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2786 }
2787 
2788 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2789 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2790 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2791 {
2792 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2793 		return NULL;
2794 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2795 }
2796 
2797 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2798 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2799 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2800 {
2801 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2802 		return NULL;
2803 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2804 }
2805 
2806 /**
2807  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2808  * @hw: the hardware
2809  * @skb: the skb
2810  *
2811  * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2812  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2813  */
2814 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2815 
2816 /**
2817  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2818  *
2819  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2820  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2821  *
2822  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2823  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2824  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2825  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2826  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2827  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2828  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2829  *
2830  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2831  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2832  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2833  *
2834  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2835  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2836  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2837  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2838  *
2839  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2840  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2841  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2842  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2843  *
2844  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2845  *
2846  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2847  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2848  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2849  * based on the receive flags.
2850  *
2851  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2852  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2853  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2854  * keys.
2855  *
2856  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2857  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2858  * handler.
2859  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2860  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2861  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2862  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2863  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2864  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2865  *
2866  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2867  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2868  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2869  *
2870  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2871  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2872  * requirements:
2873  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
2874       once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
2875    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2876       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2877    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2878       encrypted with the new key when also needing
2879       @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
2880    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2881    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2882  */
2883 
2884 /**
2885  * DOC: Powersave support
2886  *
2887  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2888  *
2889  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2890  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2891  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2892  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2893  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2894  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2895  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2896  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2897  *
2898  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2899  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2900  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2901  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2902  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2903  *
2904  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2905  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2906  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2907  *
2908  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2909  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2910  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2911  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2912  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2913  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2914  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2915  *
2916  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2917  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2918  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2919  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2920  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2921  * periods.
2922  *
2923  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2924  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2925  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2926  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2927  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2928  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2929  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2930  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2931  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2932  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2933  *
2934  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2935  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2936  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2937  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2938  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2939  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2940  *
2941  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2942  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2943  */
2944 
2945 /**
2946  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2947  *
2948  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2949  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2950  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2951  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2952  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2953  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2954  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2955  *
2956  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2957  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2958  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2959  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2960  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2961  *
2962  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2963  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2964  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2965  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2966  *
2967  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2968  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2969  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2970  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2971  *
2972  *  - a list of information element IDs
2973  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2974  *
2975  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2976  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2977  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2978  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2979  * vendor information elements.
2980  *
2981  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2982  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2983  *
2984  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2985  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2986  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2987  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2988  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2989  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2990  *
2991  *
2992  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2993  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2994  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2995  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2996  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2997  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2998  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2999  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
3000  *
3001  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
3002  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
3003  * signal strength threshold checking.
3004  */
3005 
3006 /**
3007  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
3008  *
3009  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
3010  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
3011  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
3012  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
3013  *
3014  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
3015  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
3016  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
3017  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
3018  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
3019  * hardware flags.
3020  *
3021  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
3022  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
3023  * turned off otherwise.
3024  *
3025  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
3026  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
3027  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
3028  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
3029  */
3030 
3031 /**
3032  * DOC: Frame filtering
3033  *
3034  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
3035  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
3036  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
3037  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
3038  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
3039  *
3040  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
3041  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
3042  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
3043  *
3044  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
3045  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
3046  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
3047  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
3048  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
3049  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
3050  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
3051  *
3052  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3053  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3054  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3055  * or dropped.
3056  *
3057  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3058  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3059  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3060  * the flag, but not clear it.
3061  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3062  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3063  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3064  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3065  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3066  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3067  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3068  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3069  */
3070 
3071 /**
3072  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3073  *
3074  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3075  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3076  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3077  *
3078  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3079  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3080  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3081  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3082  * the driver code.
3083  *
3084  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3085  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3086  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3087  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3088  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3089  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3090  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3091  *
3092  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3093  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3094  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3095  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3096  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3097  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3098  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3099  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3100  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3101  * @sta_notify callback.
3102  *
3103  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3104  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3105  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3106  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3107  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3108  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3109  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3110  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3111  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3112  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3113  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3114  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3115  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3116  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3117  *
3118  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3119  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3120  *
3121  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3122  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3123  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3124  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3125  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3126  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3127  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3128  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3129  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3130  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3131  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3132  *
3133  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3134  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3135  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3136  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3137  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3138  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3139  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3140  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3141  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3142  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3143  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3144  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3145  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3146  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3147  *
3148  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3149  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3150  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3151  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3152  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3153  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3154  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3155  *
3156  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3157  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3158  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3159  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3160  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3161  *
3162  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3163  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3164  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3165  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3166  */
3167 
3168 /**
3169  * DOC: HW queue control
3170  *
3171  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3172  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3173  * was problematic for a few reasons:
3174  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3175  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3176  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3177  *
3178  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3179  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3180  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3181  *
3182  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3183  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3184  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3185  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3186  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3187  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3188  * the hardware queue.
3189  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3190  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3191  *
3192  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3193  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3194  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3195  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3196  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3197  *
3198  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3199  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3200  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3201  * off-channel queue:         9
3202  *
3203  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3204  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3205  *
3206  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3207  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3208  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3209  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3210  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3211  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3212  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3213  *
3214  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3215  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3216  *
3217  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3218  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3219  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3220  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3221  */
3222 
3223 /**
3224  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3225  *
3226  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3227  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3228  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3229  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3230  *
3231  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3232  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3233  *	multicast address.
3234  *
3235  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3236  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3237  *
3238  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3239  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3240  *
3241  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3242  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3243  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3244  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3245  *	honour this flag if possible.
3246  *
3247  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3248  *	station
3249  *
3250  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3251  *
3252  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3253  *
3254  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3255  *
3256  * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3257  */
3258 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3259 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3260 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3261 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3262 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3263 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3264 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3265 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3266 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3267 	FIF_MCAST_ACTION	= 1<<9,
3268 };
3269 
3270 /**
3271  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3272  *
3273  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3274  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3275  *
3276  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3277  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3278  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3279  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3280  *
3281  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3282  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3283  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3284  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3285  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3286  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3287  *	ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3288  *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3289  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3290  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3291  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3292  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3293  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3294  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3295  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3296  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3297  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3298  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3299  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3300  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3301  */
3302 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3303 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3304 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3305 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3306 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3307 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3308 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3309 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3310 };
3311 
3312 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3313 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3314 
3315 /**
3316  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3317  *
3318  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3319  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3320  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3321  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3322  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3323  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3324  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3325  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3326  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3327  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3328  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3329  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3330  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3331  */
3332 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3333 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3334 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3335 	u16 tid;
3336 	u16 ssn;
3337 	u16 buf_size;
3338 	bool amsdu;
3339 	u16 timeout;
3340 };
3341 
3342 /**
3343  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3344  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3345  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3346  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3347  */
3348 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3349 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3350 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3351 };
3352 
3353 /**
3354  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3355  *
3356  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3357  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3358  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3359  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3360  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3361  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3362  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3363  *	the peer.
3364  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3365  *	by the peer
3366  */
3367 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3368 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3369 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3370 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3371 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3372 };
3373 
3374 /**
3375  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3376  *
3377  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3378  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3379  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3380  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3381  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3382  *
3383  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3384  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3385  *	for sending management frames offchannel.
3386  */
3387 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3388 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3389 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3390 };
3391 
3392 /**
3393  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3394  *
3395  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3396  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3397  *
3398  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3399  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3400  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3401  *	of wowlan configuration)
3402  */
3403 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3404 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3405 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3406 };
3407 
3408 /**
3409  * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3410  * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3411  *	only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3412  * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3413  * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3414  *	used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3415  *	valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3416  */
3417 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3418 	u16 duration;
3419 	u16 subtype;
3420 	u8 success:1;
3421 };
3422 
3423 /**
3424  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3425  *
3426  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3427  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3428  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3429  *
3430  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3431  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3432  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3433  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3434  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3435  *	Must be atomic.
3436  *
3437  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3438  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3439  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3440  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3441  *	or zero.
3442  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3443  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3444  *	is added.
3445  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3446  *
3447  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3448  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3449  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3450  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3451  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3452  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3453  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3454  *
3455  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3456  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3457  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3458  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3459  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3460  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3461  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3462  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3463  *	must return 1 from this function.
3464  *
3465  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3466  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3467  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3468  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3469  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3470  *
3471  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3472  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3473  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3474  *	in suspend().
3475  *
3476  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3477  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3478  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3479  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3480  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3481  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3482  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3483  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3484  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3485  *
3486  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3487  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3488  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3489  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3490  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3491  *
3492  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3493  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3494  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3495  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3496  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3497  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3498  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3499  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3500  *
3501  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3502  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3503  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3504  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3505  *
3506  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3507  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3508  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3509  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3510  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3511  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3512  *	can sleep.
3513  *
3514  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3515  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3516  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3517  *
3518  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3519  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3520  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3521  *
3522  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3523  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3524  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3525  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3526  *	which flags are changed.
3527  *	This callback can sleep.
3528  *
3529  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3530  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3531  *
3532  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3533  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3534  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3535  *	is enabled.
3536  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3537  *	The callback can sleep.
3538  *
3539  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3540  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3541  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3542  *	The callback must be atomic.
3543  *
3544  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3545  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3546  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3547  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3548  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3549  *
3550  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3551  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3552  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3553  *
3554  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3555  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3556  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3557  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3558  *	that power save is disabled.
3559  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3560  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3561  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3562  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3563  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3564  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3565  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3566  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3567  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3568  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3569  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3570  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3571  *	The callback can sleep.
3572  *
3573  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3574  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3575  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3576  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3577  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3578  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3579  *	The callback can sleep.
3580  *
3581  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3582  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3583  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3584  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3585  *
3586  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3587  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3588  *
3589  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3590  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3591  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3592  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3593  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3594  *
3595  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3596  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3597  *	this notification.
3598  *	The callback can sleep.
3599  *
3600  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3601  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3602  *	The callback can sleep.
3603  *
3604  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3605  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3606  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3607  *	The callback must be atomic.
3608  *
3609  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3610  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3611  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3612  *	should be set as well.
3613  *	The callback can sleep.
3614  *
3615  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3616  *	The callback can sleep.
3617  *
3618  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3619  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3620  *
3621  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3622  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3623  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3624  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3625  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3626  *	This callback can sleep.
3627  *
3628  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3629  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3630  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3631  *	callback can sleep.
3632  *
3633  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3634  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3635  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3636  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3637  *
3638  * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3639  *	power for the station.
3640  *	This callback can sleep.
3641  *
3642  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3643  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3644  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3645  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3646  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3647  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3648  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3649  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3650  *	The callback can sleep.
3651  *
3652  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3653  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3654  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3655  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3656  *	in @sta_state.
3657  *	The callback can sleep.
3658  *
3659  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3660  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3661  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3662  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3663  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3664  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3665  *	Must be atomic.
3666  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3667  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3668  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3669  *
3670  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3671  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3672  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3673  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3674  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3675  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3676  *	The callback can sleep.
3677  *
3678  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3679  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3680  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3681  *	The callback can sleep.
3682  *
3683  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3684  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3685  *	required function.
3686  *	The callback can sleep.
3687  *
3688  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3689  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3690  *	required function.
3691  *	The callback can sleep.
3692  *
3693  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3694  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3695  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3696  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3697  *	The callback can sleep.
3698  *
3699  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3700  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3701  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3702  *	TSF synchronization.
3703  *	The callback can sleep.
3704  *
3705  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3706  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3707  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3708  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3709  *	The callback can sleep.
3710  *
3711  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3712  *
3713  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3714  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3715  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3716  *	The callback can sleep.
3717  *
3718  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3719  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3720  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3721  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3722  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3723  *
3724  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3725  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3726  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3727  *
3728  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3729  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3730  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3731  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3732  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3733  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3734  *	The callback can sleep.
3735  *
3736  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3737  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3738  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3739  *	completion of the channel switch.
3740  *
3741  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3742  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3743  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3744  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3745  *
3746  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3747  *
3748  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3749  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3750  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3751  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3752  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3753  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3754  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3755  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3756  *	must be accepted in this case.
3757  *	This callback may sleep.
3758  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3759  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3760  *
3761  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3762  *
3763  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3764  *
3765  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3766  *	queues before entering power save.
3767  *
3768  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3769  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3770  *	The callback can sleep.
3771  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3772  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3773  *	The callback must be atomic.
3774  *
3775  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3776  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3777  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3778  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3779  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3780  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3781  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3782  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3783  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3784  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3785  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3786  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3787  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3788  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3789  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3790  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3791  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3792  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3793  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3794  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3795  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3796  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3797  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3798  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3799  *	This callback must be atomic.
3800  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3801  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3802  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3803  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3804  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3805  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3806  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3807  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3808  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3809  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3810  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3811  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3812  *	This callback must be atomic.
3813  *
3814  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3815  *
3816  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3817  *
3818  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3819  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3820  *
3821  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3822  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3823  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3824  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3825  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3826  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3827  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3828  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3829  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3830  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3831  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3832  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3833  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3834  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3835  *	Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
3836  *	data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
3837  *	driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
3838  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3839  * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
3840  *	transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
3841  *	is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
3842  *
3843  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3844  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3845  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3846  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3847  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3848  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3849  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3850  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3851  *
3852  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3853  *	This callback may sleep.
3854  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3855  *	This callback may sleep.
3856  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3857  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3858  *	channel context with different settings
3859  *	This callback may sleep.
3860  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3861  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3862  *	This callback may sleep.
3863  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3864  *	unbound from vif.
3865  *	This callback may sleep.
3866  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3867  *	another, as specified in the list of
3868  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3869  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3870  *	This callback may sleep.
3871  *
3872  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3873  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3874  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3875  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3876  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3877  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3878  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3879  *
3880  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3881  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3882  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3883  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3884  *	This callback may sleep.
3885  *
3886  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3887  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3888  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3889  *
3890  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3891  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3892  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3893  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3894  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3895  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3896  *	1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3897  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3898  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3899  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3900  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3901  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3902  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3903  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3904  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3905  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3906  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3907  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3908  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3909  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3910  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3911  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3912  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3913  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3914  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3915  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3916  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3917  *
3918  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3919  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3920  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3921  *
3922  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3923  *	and hardware limits.
3924  *
3925  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3926  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3927  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3928  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3929  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3930  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3931  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3932  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3933  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3934  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3935  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3936  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3937  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3938  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3939  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3940  *	the function call.
3941  *
3942  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3943  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3944  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3945  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3946  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3947  *
3948  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3949  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3950  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3951  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3952  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3953  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3954  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3955  *	changed parameters.
3956  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3957  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3958  *	this call.
3959  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3960  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3961  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3962  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3963  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3964  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3965  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3966  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3967  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3968  *
3969  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3970  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3971  * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3972  * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3973  *	This callback may sleep.
3974  * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
3975  *	This callback may sleep.
3976  * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
3977  *	4-address mode
3978  * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
3979  * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
3980  *	to use rx decapsulation offload
3981  * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
3982  *	This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
3983  *	are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
3984  *	The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
3985  *	twt structure.
3986  * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
3987  *	from the peer.
3988  * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for
3989  *	radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit
3990  *	or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev.
3991  *	Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime
3992  *	switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected
3993  *	radar channel.
3994  *	The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to
3995  *	disable background CAC/radar detection.
3996  */
3997 struct ieee80211_ops {
3998 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3999 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
4000 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
4001 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4002 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4003 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
4004 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
4005 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4006 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
4007 #endif
4008 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4009 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4010 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4011 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4012 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
4013 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4014 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4015 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
4016 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4017 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4018 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4019 				 u32 changed);
4020 
4021 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4022 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4023 
4024 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4025 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
4026 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4027 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
4028 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
4029 				 u64 multicast);
4030 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4031 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4032 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
4033 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
4034 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4035 		       bool set);
4036 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
4037 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4038 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
4039 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4040 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4041 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
4042 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4043 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
4044 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4045 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4046 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
4047 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4048 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
4049 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4050 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
4051 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4052 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4053 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4054 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4055 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
4056 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
4057 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4058 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4059 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4060 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4061 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
4062 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4063 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4064 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4065 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4066 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4067 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4068 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4069 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4070 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4071 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4072 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4073 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4074 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4075 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4076 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4077 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4078 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4079 				struct dentry *dir);
4080 #endif
4081 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4082 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4083 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4084 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4085 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4086 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4087 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4088 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4089 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4090 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4091 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4092 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4093 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4094 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4095 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4096 			      u32 changed);
4097 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4098 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4099 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4100 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4101 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4102 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4103 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
4104 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4105 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
4106 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4107 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4108 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4109 			u64 tsf);
4110 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4111 			   s64 offset);
4112 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4113 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4114 
4115 	/**
4116 	 * @ampdu_action:
4117 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4118 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4119 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4120 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4121 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4122 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4123 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4124 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4125 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4126 	 *
4127 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4128 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4129 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
4130 	 *
4131 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4132 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4133 	 *
4134 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
4135 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
4136 	 * - ``TX:        81``
4137 	 *
4138 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4139 	 *
4140 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4141 	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4142 	 * if the session can start immediately.
4143 	 *
4144 	 * The callback can sleep.
4145 	 */
4146 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4147 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4148 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4149 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4150 		struct survey_info *survey);
4151 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4152 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4153 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4154 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4155 			    void *data, int len);
4156 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4157 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
4158 			     void *data, int len);
4159 #endif
4160 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4161 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
4162 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4163 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4164 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4165 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4166 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4167 
4168 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4169 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4170 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4171 				 int duration,
4172 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4173 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4174 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4175 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4176 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4177 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4178 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4179 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4180 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4181 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4183 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4184 
4185 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4186 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4187 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
4188 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4189 				      bool more_data);
4190 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4191 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4192 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
4193 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4194 					bool more_data);
4195 
4196 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4197 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4198 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4199 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4200 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4201 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4202 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4203 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
4204 
4205 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4206 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4207 				  struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4208 	void	(*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4209 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4210 				   struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4211 
4212 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4213 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4214 
4215 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4216 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4217 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4218 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4219 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4220 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4221 			       u32 changed);
4222 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4223 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4224 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4225 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4226 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4227 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4228 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4229 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4230 				  int n_vifs,
4231 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4232 
4233 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4234 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4235 
4236 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4237 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4238 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4239 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4240 #endif
4241 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4242 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4243 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4244 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4245 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4246 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4247 
4248 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4249 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4250 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4251 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4252 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4253 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4254 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4255 
4256 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4257 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4258 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4259 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4260 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4261 			   int *dbm);
4262 
4263 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4264 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4265 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4266 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4267 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4268 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4269 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4270 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4271 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4272 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4273 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4274 
4275 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4276 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4277 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4278 
4279 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4280 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4281 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4282 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4283 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4284 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4285 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4286 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4287 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4288 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4289 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4290 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4291 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4292 			    u8 instance_id);
4293 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4294 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4295 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4296 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4297 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4298 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4299 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4300 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4301 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4302 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4303 	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4304 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4305 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4306 			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4307 	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4308 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4309 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4310 	void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4311 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4312 	void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4313 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4314 	int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4315 			     const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4316 	void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4317 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4318 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4319 	void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4320 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4321 			      struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4322 	void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4323 				     struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4324 	int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4325 				    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4326 
4327 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
4328 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(2);
4329 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(3);
4330 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(4);
4331 };
4332 
4333 /**
4334  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4335  *
4336  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4337  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4338  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4339  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4340  * @priv_data_len.
4341  *
4342  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4343  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4344  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4345  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4346  *
4347  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4348  */
4349 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4350 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4351 					   const char *requested_name);
4352 
4353 /**
4354  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4355  *
4356  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4357  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4358  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4359  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4360  * @priv_data_len.
4361  *
4362  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4363  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4364  *
4365  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4366  */
4367 static inline
ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4368 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4369 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4370 {
4371 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4372 }
4373 
4374 /**
4375  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4376  *
4377  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4378  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4379  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4380  *
4381  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4382  *
4383  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4384  */
4385 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4386 
4387 /**
4388  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4389  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4390  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4391  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4392  */
4393 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4394 	int throughput;
4395 	int blink_time;
4396 };
4397 
4398 /**
4399  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4400  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4401  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4402  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4403  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4404  */
4405 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4406 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4407 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4408 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4409 };
4410 
4411 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4412 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4413 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4414 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4415 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4416 const char *
4417 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4418 				   unsigned int flags,
4419 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4420 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4421 #endif
4422 /**
4423  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4424  *
4425  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4426  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4427  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4428  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4429  *
4430  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4431  *
4432  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4433  */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4434 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4435 {
4436 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4437 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4438 #else
4439 	return NULL;
4440 #endif
4441 }
4442 
4443 /**
4444  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4445  *
4446  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4447  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4448  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4449  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4450  *
4451  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4452  *
4453  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4454  */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4455 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4456 {
4457 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4458 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4459 #else
4460 	return NULL;
4461 #endif
4462 }
4463 
4464 /**
4465  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4466  *
4467  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4468  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4469  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4470  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4471  *
4472  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4473  *
4474  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4475  */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4476 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4477 {
4478 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4479 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4480 #else
4481 	return NULL;
4482 #endif
4483 }
4484 
4485 /**
4486  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4487  *
4488  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4489  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4490  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4491  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4492  *
4493  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4494  *
4495  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4496  */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4497 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4498 {
4499 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4500 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4501 #else
4502 	return NULL;
4503 #endif
4504 }
4505 
4506 /**
4507  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4508  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4509  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4510  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4511  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4512  *
4513  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4514  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4515  *
4516  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4517  */
4518 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4519 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4520 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4521 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4522 {
4523 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4524 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4525 						  blink_table_len);
4526 #else
4527 	return NULL;
4528 #endif
4529 }
4530 
4531 /**
4532  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4533  *
4534  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4535  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4536  *
4537  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4538  */
4539 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4540 
4541 /**
4542  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4543  *
4544  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4545  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4546  * before calling this function.
4547  *
4548  * @hw: the hardware to free
4549  */
4550 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4551 
4552 /**
4553  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4554  *
4555  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4556  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4557  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4558  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4559  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4560  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4561  *
4562  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4563  */
4564 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4565 
4566 /**
4567  * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4568  *
4569  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4570  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4571  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4572  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4573  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4574  *
4575  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4576  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4577  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4578  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4579  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4580  *
4581  * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4582  *
4583  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4584  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4585  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4586  * @list: the destination list
4587  */
4588 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4589 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4590 
4591 /**
4592  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4593  *
4594  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4595  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4596  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4597  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4598  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4599  *
4600  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4601  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4602  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4603  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4604  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4605  *
4606  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4607  *
4608  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4609  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4610  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4611  * @napi: the NAPI context
4612  */
4613 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4614 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4615 
4616 /**
4617  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4618  *
4619  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4620  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4621  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4622  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4623  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4624  *
4625  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4626  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4627  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4628  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4629  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4630  *
4631  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4632  *
4633  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4634  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4635  */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4636 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4637 {
4638 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4639 }
4640 
4641 /**
4642  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4643  *
4644  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4645  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4646  *
4647  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4648  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4649  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4650  *
4651  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4652  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4653  */
4654 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4655 
4656 /**
4657  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4658  *
4659  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4660  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4661  *
4662  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4663  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4664  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4665  *
4666  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4667  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4668  */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4669 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4670 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4671 {
4672 	local_bh_disable();
4673 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4674 	local_bh_enable();
4675 }
4676 
4677 /**
4678  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4679  *
4680  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4681  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4682  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4683  *
4684  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4685  *
4686  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4687  * each other.
4688  *
4689  * @sta: currently connected sta
4690  * @start: start or stop PS
4691  *
4692  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4693  */
4694 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4695 
4696 /**
4697  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4698  *                                  (in process context)
4699  *
4700  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4701  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4702  * applies.
4703  *
4704  * @sta: currently connected sta
4705  * @start: start or stop PS
4706  *
4707  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4708  */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4709 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4710 						  bool start)
4711 {
4712 	int ret;
4713 
4714 	local_bh_disable();
4715 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4716 	local_bh_enable();
4717 
4718 	return ret;
4719 }
4720 
4721 /**
4722  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4723  * @sta: currently connected station
4724  *
4725  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4726  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4727  * connected station was received.
4728  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4729  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4730  * be serialized.
4731  */
4732 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4733 
4734 /**
4735  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4736  * @sta: currently connected station
4737  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4738  *
4739  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4740  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4741  * from a connected station was received.
4742  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4743  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4744  * serialized.
4745  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4746  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4747  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4748  * checks.
4749  */
4750 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4751 
4752 /*
4753  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4754  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4755  */
4756 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4757 
4758 /**
4759  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4760  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4761  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4762  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4763  *
4764  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4765  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4766  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4767  *
4768  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4769  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4770  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4771  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4772  *
4773  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4774  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4775  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4776  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4777  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4778  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4779  *
4780  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4781  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4782  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4783  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4784  * use this API.
4785  */
4786 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4787 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4788 
4789 /**
4790  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4791  *
4792  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4793  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4794  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4795  *
4796  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4797  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4798  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4799  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4800  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4801  */
4802 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4803 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4804 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4805 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4806 			    int max_rates);
4807 
4808 /**
4809  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4810  *
4811  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4812  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4813  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4814  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4815  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4816  * slow stations to starve).
4817  *
4818  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4819  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4820  */
4821 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4822 					   u32 thr);
4823 
4824 /**
4825  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4826  *
4827  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4828  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4829  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4830  *
4831  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4832  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4833  * @info: tx status information
4834  */
4835 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4836 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4837 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4838 
4839 /**
4840  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4841  *
4842  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4843  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4844  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4845  *
4846  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4847  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4848  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4849  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4850  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4851  *
4852  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4853  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4854  */
4855 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4856 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4857 
4858 /**
4859  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4860  *
4861  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4862  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4863  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4864  *
4865  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4866  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4867  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4868  *
4869  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4870  * @status: tx status information
4871  */
4872 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4873 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4874 
4875 /**
4876  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4877  *
4878  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4879  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4880  * specific skbs.
4881  *
4882  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4883  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4884  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4885  *
4886  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4887  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4888  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4889  * @info: tx status information
4890  */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)4891 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4892 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4893 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4894 {
4895 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4896 		.sta = sta,
4897 		.info = info,
4898 	};
4899 
4900 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4901 }
4902 
4903 /**
4904  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4905  *
4906  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4907  *
4908  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4909  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4910  * for a single hardware.
4911  *
4912  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4913  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4914  */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4915 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4916 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4917 {
4918 	local_bh_disable();
4919 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4920 	local_bh_enable();
4921 }
4922 
4923 /**
4924  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4925  *
4926  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4927  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4928  *
4929  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4930  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4931  *
4932  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4933  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4934  */
4935 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4936 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4937 
4938 /**
4939  * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4940  *
4941  * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4942  * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4943  * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4944  * 802.11 frames.
4945  *
4946  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4947  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4948  * calls in the same tx status family.
4949  *
4950  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4951  * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4952  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4953  */
4954 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4955 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4956 			       struct sk_buff *skb);
4957 
4958 /**
4959  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4960  *
4961  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4962  * connected STA.
4963  *
4964  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4965  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4966  */
4967 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4968 
4969 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4970 
4971 /**
4972  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4973  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4974  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4975  * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4976  *	to countdown counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4977  *	should be ignored.
4978  * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element
4979  */
4980 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4981 	u16 tim_offset;
4982 	u16 tim_length;
4983 
4984 	u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
4985 	u16 mbssid_off;
4986 };
4987 
4988 /**
4989  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4990  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4991  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4992  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4993  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4994  *
4995  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4996  * obtain the beacon template.
4997  *
4998  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4999  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
5000  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
5001  * applicable, the CSA count.
5002  *
5003  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5004  *
5005  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5006  */
5007 struct sk_buff *
5008 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5009 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5010 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
5011 
5012 /**
5013  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
5014  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5015  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5016  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
5017  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5018  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
5019  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
5020  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5021  *
5022  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5023  * obtain the beacon frame.
5024  *
5025  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5026  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
5027  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
5028  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
5029  *
5030  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5031  *
5032  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5033  */
5034 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5035 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5036 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
5037 
5038 /**
5039  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
5040  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5041  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5042  *
5043  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5044  *
5045  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5046  */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif)5047 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5048 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5049 {
5050 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
5051 }
5052 
5053 /**
5054  * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
5055  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5056  *
5057  * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
5058  * This function is called implicitly when
5059  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
5060  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
5061  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
5062  *
5063  * Return: new countdown value
5064  */
5065 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5066 
5067 /**
5068  * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5069  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5070  * @counter: the new value for the counter
5071  *
5072  * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5073  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5074  *
5075  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5076  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5077  */
5078 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5079 
5080 /**
5081  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5082  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5083  *
5084  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5085  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5086  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5087  */
5088 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5089 
5090 /**
5091  * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5092  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5093  *
5094  * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5095  */
5096 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5097 
5098 /**
5099  * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5100  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5101  *
5102  * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5103  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5104  * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5105  */
5106 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5107 
5108 /**
5109  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5110  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5111  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5112  *
5113  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5114  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5115  *
5116  * Can only be called in AP mode.
5117  *
5118  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5119  */
5120 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5121 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5122 
5123 /**
5124  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5125  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5126  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5127  *
5128  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5129  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5130  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5131  *
5132  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5133  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5134  *
5135  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5136  */
5137 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5138 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5139 
5140 /**
5141  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5142  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5143  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5144  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5145  *	if at all possible
5146  *
5147  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5148  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5149  * BSSID and address is used.
5150  *
5151  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5152  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5153  *
5154  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5155  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5156  *
5157  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5158  */
5159 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5160 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5161 				       bool qos_ok);
5162 
5163 /**
5164  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5165  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5166  * @src_addr: source MAC address
5167  * @ssid: SSID buffer
5168  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5169  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5170  *
5171  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5172  * hardware.
5173  *
5174  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5175  */
5176 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5177 				       const u8 *src_addr,
5178 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5179 				       size_t tailroom);
5180 
5181 /**
5182  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5183  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5184  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5185  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5186  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5187  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5188  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5189  *
5190  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5191  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5192  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5193  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5194  */
5195 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5196 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5197 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5198 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5199 
5200 /**
5201  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5202  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5203  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5204  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5205  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5206  *
5207  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5208  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5209  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5210  *
5211  * Return: The duration.
5212  */
5213 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5214 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5215 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5216 
5217 /**
5218  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5219  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5220  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5221  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5222  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5223  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5224  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5225  *
5226  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5227  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5228  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5229  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5230  */
5231 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5232 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5233 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5234 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5235 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5236 
5237 /**
5238  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5239  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5240  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5241  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5242  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5243  *
5244  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5245  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5246  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5247  *
5248  * Return: The duration.
5249  */
5250 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5251 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5252 				    size_t frame_len,
5253 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5254 
5255 /**
5256  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5257  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5258  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5259  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5260  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5261  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5262  *
5263  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5264  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5265  *
5266  * Return: The duration.
5267  */
5268 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5269 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5270 					enum nl80211_band band,
5271 					size_t frame_len,
5272 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5273 
5274 /**
5275  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5276  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5277  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5278  *
5279  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5280  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5281  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5282  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5283  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5284  *
5285  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5286  * frames are available.
5287  *
5288  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5289  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5290  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5291  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5292  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5293  * use common code for all beacons.
5294  */
5295 struct sk_buff *
5296 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5297 
5298 /**
5299  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5300  *
5301  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5302  *
5303  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5304  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5305  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5306  */
5307 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5308 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5309 
5310 /**
5311  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5312  *
5313  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5314  * from the given packet.
5315  *
5316  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5317  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5318  *	with this P1K
5319  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5320  */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)5321 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5322 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5323 {
5324 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5325 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5326 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5327 
5328 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5329 }
5330 
5331 /**
5332  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5333  *
5334  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5335  * and transmitter address.
5336  *
5337  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5338  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5339  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5340  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5341  */
5342 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5343 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5344 
5345 /**
5346  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5347  *
5348  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5349  * in the packet.
5350  *
5351  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5352  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5353  *	encrypted with this key
5354  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5355  */
5356 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5357 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5358 
5359 /**
5360  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5361  *
5362  * @pos: start of crypto header
5363  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5364  * @pn: PN to add
5365  *
5366  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5367  * the packet payload)
5368  *
5369  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5370  * point to the crypto header)
5371  */
5372 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5373 
5374 /**
5375  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5376  *
5377  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5378  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5379  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5380  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5381  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5382  *
5383  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5384  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5385  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5386  *
5387  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5388  * can be done concurrently.
5389  */
5390 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5391 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5392 
5393 /**
5394  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5395  *
5396  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5397  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5398  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5399  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5400  * @seq: new sequence data
5401  *
5402  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5403  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5404  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5405  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5406  *
5407  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5408  * can be done concurrently.
5409  */
5410 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5411 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5412 
5413 /**
5414  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5415  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5416  *
5417  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5418  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5419  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5420  *
5421  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5422  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5423  */
5424 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5425 
5426 /**
5427  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5428  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5429  * @keyconf: new key data
5430  *
5431  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5432  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5433  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5434  *
5435  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5436  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5437  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5438  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5439  *
5440  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5441  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5442  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5443  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5444  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5445  * of the reconfiguration.
5446  *
5447  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5448  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5449  *
5450  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5451  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5452  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5453  * the key that's being replaced.
5454  */
5455 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5456 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5457 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5458 
5459 /**
5460  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5461  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5462  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5463  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5464  * @gfp: allocation flags
5465  */
5466 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5467 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5468 
5469 /**
5470  * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5471  *
5472  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5473  * at the same time.
5474  *
5475  * @keyconf: the key in question
5476  */
5477 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5478 
5479 /**
5480  * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5481  *
5482  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5483  * at the same time.
5484  *
5485  * @keyconf: the key in question
5486  */
5487 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5488 
5489 /**
5490  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5491  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5492  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5493  *
5494  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5495  */
5496 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5497 
5498 /**
5499  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5500  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5501  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5502  *
5503  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5504  */
5505 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5506 
5507 /**
5508  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5509  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5510  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5511  *
5512  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5513  *
5514  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5515  */
5516 
5517 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5518 
5519 /**
5520  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5521  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5522  *
5523  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5524  */
5525 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5526 
5527 /**
5528  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5529  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5530  *
5531  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5532  */
5533 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5534 
5535 /**
5536  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5537  *
5538  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5539  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5540  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5541  * any context, including hardirq context.
5542  *
5543  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5544  * @info: information about the completed scan
5545  */
5546 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5547 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5548 
5549 /**
5550  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5551  *
5552  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5553  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5554  *
5555  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5556  */
5557 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5558 
5559 /**
5560  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5561  *
5562  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5563  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5564  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5565  * while associating, for instance.
5566  *
5567  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5568  */
5569 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5570 
5571 /**
5572  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5573  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5574  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5575  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5576  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5577  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5578  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5579  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5580  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5581  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5582  *	is not in the driver.  This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5583  *	for instance.
5584  */
5585 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5586 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5587 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5588 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5589 	IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER	= BIT(2),
5590 };
5591 
5592 /**
5593  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5594  *
5595  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5596  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5597  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5598  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5599  *
5600  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5601  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5602  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5603  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5604  */
5605 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5606 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5607 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5608 				  void *data);
5609 
5610 /**
5611  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5612  *
5613  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5614  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5615  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5616  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5617  * be used.
5618  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5619  *
5620  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5621  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5622  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5623  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5624  */
5625 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5626 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5627 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5628 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5629 				    void *data)
5630 {
5631 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5632 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5633 				     iterator, data);
5634 }
5635 
5636 /**
5637  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5638  *
5639  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5640  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5641  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5642  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5643  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5644  *
5645  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5646  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5647  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5648  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5649  */
5650 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5651 						u32 iter_flags,
5652 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5653 						    u8 *mac,
5654 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5655 						void *data);
5656 
5657 /**
5658  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5659  *
5660  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5661  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5662  * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
5663  *
5664  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5665  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5666  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5667  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5668  */
5669 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5670 					     u32 iter_flags,
5671 					     void (*iterator)(void *data,
5672 						u8 *mac,
5673 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5674 					     void *data);
5675 
5676 /**
5677  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5678  *
5679  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5680  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5681  * function for them.
5682  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5683  *
5684  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5685  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5686  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5687  */
5688 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5689 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5690 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5691 				       void *data);
5692 /**
5693  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5694  *
5695  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5696  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5697  *
5698  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5699  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5700  */
5701 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5702 
5703 /**
5704  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5705  *
5706  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5707  * workqueue.
5708  *
5709  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5710  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5711  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5712  */
5713 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5714 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5715 				  unsigned long delay);
5716 
5717 /**
5718  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5719  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5720  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5721  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5722  *
5723  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5724  *
5725  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5726  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5727  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5728  */
5729 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5730 				  u16 timeout);
5731 
5732 /**
5733  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5734  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5735  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5736  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5737  *
5738  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5739  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5740  * from any context.
5741  */
5742 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5743 				      u16 tid);
5744 
5745 /**
5746  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5747  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5748  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5749  *
5750  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5751  *
5752  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5753  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5754  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5755  */
5756 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5757 
5758 /**
5759  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5760  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5761  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5762  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5763  *
5764  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5765  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5766  * can be called from any context.
5767  */
5768 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5769 				     u16 tid);
5770 
5771 /**
5772  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5773  *
5774  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5775  * @addr: station's address
5776  *
5777  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5778  *
5779  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5780  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5781  */
5782 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5783 					 const u8 *addr);
5784 
5785 /**
5786  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5787  *
5788  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5789  * @addr: remote station's address
5790  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5791  *
5792  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5793  *
5794  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5795  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5796  *
5797  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5798  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5799  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5800  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5801  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5802  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5803  *      is not reliable.
5804  *
5805  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5806  */
5807 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5808 					       const u8 *addr,
5809 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5810 
5811 /**
5812  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5813  * @hw: the hardware
5814  * @pubsta: the station
5815  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5816  *
5817  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5818  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5819  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5820  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5821  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5822  *
5823  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5824  * manner.
5825  *
5826  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5827  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5828  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5829  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5830  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5831  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5832  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5833  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5834  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5835  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5836  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5837  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5838  * woke up while blocked or not.
5839  */
5840 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5841 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5842 
5843 /**
5844  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5845  * @pubsta: the station
5846  *
5847  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5848  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5849  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5850  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5851  *
5852  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5853  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5854  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5855  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5856  *
5857  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5858  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5859  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5860  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5861  */
5862 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5863 
5864 /**
5865  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5866  * @pubsta: the station
5867  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5868  *
5869  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5870  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5871  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5872  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5873  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5874  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5875  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5876  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5877  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5878  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5879  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5880  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5881  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5882  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5883  */
5884 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5885 
5886 /**
5887  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5888  *
5889  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
5890  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5891  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5892  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5893  *
5894  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5895  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5896  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5897  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5898  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5899  * attempts.
5900  *
5901  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5902  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5903  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5904  * them to 0.
5905  *
5906  * @pubsta: the station
5907  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5908  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5909  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5910  */
5911 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5912 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5913 
5914 /**
5915  * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5916  *
5917  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5918  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5919  *
5920  * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5921  * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5922  */
5923 bool
5924 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5925 
5926 /**
5927  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5928  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5929  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5930  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5931  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5932  *
5933  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5934  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5935  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5936  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5937  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5938  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5939  *
5940  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5941  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5942  * set_key callback.
5943  */
5944 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5945 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5946 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5947 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5948 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5949 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5950 				      void *data),
5951 			 void *iter_data);
5952 
5953 /**
5954  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5955  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5956  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5957  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5958  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5959  *
5960  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5961  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5962  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5963  * in removal process will be skipped.
5964  *
5965  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5966  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5967  */
5968 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5969 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5970 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5971 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5972 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5973 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5974 					  void *data),
5975 			     void *iter_data);
5976 
5977 /**
5978  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5979  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5980  * @iter: iterator function
5981  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5982  *
5983  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5984  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5985  * places while calling into the driver.
5986  *
5987  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5988  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5989  * removed.
5990  *
5991  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5992  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5993  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5994  * or not.
5995  */
5996 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5997 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5998 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5999 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
6000 		     void *data),
6001 	void *iter_data);
6002 
6003 /**
6004  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
6005  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6006  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6007  *
6008  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
6009  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
6010  * information. This function must only be called from within the
6011  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
6012  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
6013  * %NULL.
6014  *
6015  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
6016  */
6017 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6018 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6019 
6020 /**
6021  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
6022  *
6023  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6024  *
6025  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
6026  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
6027  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
6028  */
6029 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6030 
6031 /**
6032  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
6033  *
6034  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6035  *
6036  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
6037  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
6038  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
6039  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
6040  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
6041  *
6042  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
6043  * without connection recovery attempts.
6044  */
6045 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6046 
6047 /**
6048  * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
6049  *
6050  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6051  * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
6052  *
6053  * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
6054  * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
6055  */
6056 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
6057 
6058 /**
6059  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
6060  *
6061  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6062  *
6063  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
6064  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
6065  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
6066  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
6067  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
6068  *
6069  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6070  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6071  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6072  * disconnect normally later.
6073  *
6074  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6075  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6076  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6077  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6078  */
6079 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6080 
6081 /**
6082  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6083  *	rssi threshold triggered
6084  *
6085  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6086  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6087  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6088  * @gfp: context flags
6089  *
6090  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6091  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6092  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6093  */
6094 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6095 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6096 			       s32 rssi_level,
6097 			       gfp_t gfp);
6098 
6099 /**
6100  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6101  *
6102  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6103  * @gfp: context flags
6104  */
6105 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6106 
6107 /**
6108  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6109  *
6110  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6111  */
6112 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6113 
6114 /**
6115  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6116  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6117  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6118  *
6119  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6120  * and wake up the suspended queues.
6121  */
6122 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
6123 
6124 /**
6125  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6126  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6127  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6128  *
6129  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6130  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6131  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6132  */
6133 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6134 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6135 
6136 /**
6137  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6138  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6139  */
6140 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6141 
6142 /**
6143  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6144  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6145  */
6146 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6147 
6148 /**
6149  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6150  *
6151  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6152  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6153  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6154  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6155  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6156  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6157  *
6158  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6159  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6160  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6161  */
6162 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6163 				  const u8 *addr);
6164 
6165 /**
6166  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6167  * @pubsta: station struct
6168  * @tid: the session's TID
6169  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6170  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
6171  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6172  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6173  *
6174  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6175  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6176  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6177  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6178  */
6179 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6180 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6181 					  u16 received_mpdus);
6182 
6183 /**
6184  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6185  *
6186  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6187  * buffer.
6188  *
6189  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6190  * @ra: the peer's destination address
6191  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6192  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6193  */
6194 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6195 
6196 /**
6197  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6198  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6199  * @addr: station mac address
6200  * @tid: the rx tid
6201  */
6202 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6203 				 unsigned int tid);
6204 
6205 /**
6206  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6207  *
6208  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6209  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6210  * reordering.
6211  *
6212  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6213  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6214  *
6215  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6216  * @addr: station mac address
6217  * @tid: the rx tid
6218  */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6219 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6220 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6221 {
6222 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6223 		return;
6224 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6225 }
6226 
6227 /**
6228  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6229  *
6230  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6231  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6232  * reordering.
6233  *
6234  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6235  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6236  *
6237  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6238  * @addr: station mac address
6239  * @tid: the rx tid
6240  */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6241 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6242 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6243 {
6244 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6245 		return;
6246 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6247 }
6248 
6249 /**
6250  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6251  *
6252  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6253  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6254  *
6255  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6256  *
6257  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6258  * @addr: station mac address
6259  * @tid: the rx tid
6260  */
6261 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6262 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6263 
6264 /* Rate control API */
6265 
6266 /**
6267  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6268  *
6269  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6270  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6271  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6272  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6273  *	to be filled in
6274  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6275  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6276  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6277  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6278  *	RTS threshold
6279  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6280  *	if the selected rate supports it
6281  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6282  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6283  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6284  */
6285 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6286 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6287 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6288 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6289 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6290 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6291 	bool rts, short_preamble;
6292 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
6293 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6294 	bool bss;
6295 };
6296 
6297 /**
6298  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6299  */
6300 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6301 	/**
6302 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6303 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6304 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6305 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6306 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6307 	 */
6308 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6309 	/**
6310 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6311 	 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6312 	 */
6313 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6314 };
6315 
6316 struct rate_control_ops {
6317 	unsigned long capa;
6318 	const char *name;
6319 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6320 	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6321 			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6322 	void (*free)(void *priv);
6323 
6324 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6325 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6326 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6327 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6328 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6329 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6330 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6331 			    u32 changed);
6332 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6333 			 void *priv_sta);
6334 
6335 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6336 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6337 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6338 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6339 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6340 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
6341 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6342 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6343 
6344 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6345 				struct dentry *dir);
6346 
6347 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6348 
6349 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
6350 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(2);
6351 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(3);
6352 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(4);
6353 };
6354 
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)6355 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6356 				 enum nl80211_band band,
6357 				 int index)
6358 {
6359 	return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6360 }
6361 
6362 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6363 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6364 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6365 {
6366 	int i;
6367 
6368 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6369 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6370 			return i;
6371 
6372 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6373 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6374 
6375 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6376 	return 0;
6377 }
6378 
6379 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6380 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6381 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6382 {
6383 	unsigned int i;
6384 
6385 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6386 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6387 			return true;
6388 	return false;
6389 }
6390 
6391 /**
6392  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6393  *
6394  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6395  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6396  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6397  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6398  *
6399  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6400  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6401  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6402  */
6403 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6404 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6405 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6406 
6407 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6408 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6409 
6410 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6411 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6412 {
6413 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6414 }
6415 
6416 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6417 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6418 {
6419 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6420 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6421 }
6422 
6423 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6424 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6425 {
6426 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6427 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6428 }
6429 
6430 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6431 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6432 {
6433 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6434 }
6435 
6436 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6437 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6438 {
6439 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6440 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6441 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6442 }
6443 
6444 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6445 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6446 {
6447 	if (p2p) {
6448 		switch (type) {
6449 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6450 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6451 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6452 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6453 		default:
6454 			break;
6455 		}
6456 	}
6457 	return type;
6458 }
6459 
6460 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6461 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6462 {
6463 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6464 }
6465 
6466 /**
6467  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6468  *
6469  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6470  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6471  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6472  *
6473  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6474  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6475  * matching GroupId management frame.
6476  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6477  */
6478 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6479 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6480 
6481 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6482 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6483 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6484 
6485 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6486 
6487 /**
6488  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6489  *
6490  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6491  *
6492  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6493  *
6494  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6495  * applicable.
6496  */
6497 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6498 
6499 /**
6500  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6501  * @vif: virtual interface
6502  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6503  * @gfp: allocation flags
6504  *
6505  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6506  */
6507 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6508 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6509 				    gfp_t gfp);
6510 
6511 /**
6512  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6513  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6514  * @vif: virtual interface
6515  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6516  * @band: the band to transmit on
6517  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6518  *
6519  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6520  */
6521 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6522 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6523 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6524 
6525 /**
6526  * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6527  *				 of injected frames.
6528  *
6529  * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6530  * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6531  * of the skb before calling this function.
6532  *
6533  * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6534  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6535  */
6536 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6537 				 struct net_device *dev);
6538 
6539 /**
6540  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6541  *
6542  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6543  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6544  *
6545  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6546  *
6547  * private:
6548  *
6549  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6550  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6551  */
6552 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6553 	u32 next_tsf;
6554 	bool has_next_tsf;
6555 
6556 	u8 absent;
6557 
6558 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6559 	struct {
6560 		u32 start;
6561 		u32 duration;
6562 		u32 interval;
6563 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6564 };
6565 
6566 /**
6567  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6568  *
6569  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6570  * @data: NoA tracking data
6571  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6572  *
6573  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6574  */
6575 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6576 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6577 
6578 /**
6579  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6580  *
6581  * @data: NoA tracking data
6582  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6583  */
6584 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6585 
6586 /**
6587  * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6588  * @vif: virtual interface
6589  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6590  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6591  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6592  * @gfp: allocation flags
6593  *
6594  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6595  */
6596 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6597 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6598 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6599 
6600 /**
6601  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6602  *
6603  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6604  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6605  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6606  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6607  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6608  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6609  *
6610  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6611  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6612  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6613  *
6614  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6615  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6616  *
6617  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6618  */
6619 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6620 
6621 /**
6622  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6623  *
6624  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6625  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6626  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6627  *
6628  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6629  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6630  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6631  *
6632  * @sta: the station
6633  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6634  */
6635 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6636 
6637 /**
6638  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6639  *
6640  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6641  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6642  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6643  *
6644  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6645  *
6646  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6647  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6648  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6649  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6650  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6651  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6652  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6653  *
6654  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6655  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6656  */
6657 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6658 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6659 
6660 /**
6661  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6662  * (in process context)
6663  *
6664  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6665  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6666  *
6667  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6668  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6669  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6670  */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6671 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6672 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6673 {
6674 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6675 
6676 	local_bh_disable();
6677 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6678 	local_bh_enable();
6679 
6680 	return skb;
6681 }
6682 
6683 /**
6684  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6685  *
6686  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6687  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6688  *
6689  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6690  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6691  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6692  */
6693 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6694 
6695 /**
6696  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6697  *
6698  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6699  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6700  *
6701  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6702  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6703  */
6704 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6705 
6706 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6707 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6708 {
6709 }
6710 
6711 /**
6712  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6713  *
6714  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6715  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6716  *
6717  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6718  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6719  *
6720  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6721  * this TXQ internally.
6722  */
6723 void ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6724 
6725 /**
6726  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6727  *
6728  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6729  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6730  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6731  *
6732  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6733  * internally.
6734  */
6735 void ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6736 			  bool force);
6737 
6738 /**
6739  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6740  *
6741  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6742  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6743  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6744  * next_txq().
6745  *
6746  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6747  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6748  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6749  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6750  * again.
6751  *
6752  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6753  * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6754  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6755  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6756  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6757  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6758  *
6759  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6760  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6761  */
6762 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6763 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6764 
6765 /**
6766  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6767  *
6768  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6769  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6770  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6771  *
6772  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6773  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6774  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6775  */
6776 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6777 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6778 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6779 
6780 /**
6781  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6782  *
6783  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6784  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6785  *
6786  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6787  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6788  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6789  * @gfp: allocation flags
6790  */
6791 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6792 				   u8 inst_id,
6793 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6794 				   gfp_t gfp);
6795 
6796 /**
6797  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6798  *
6799  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6800  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6801  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6802  *
6803  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6804  * @match: match event information
6805  * @gfp: allocation flags
6806  */
6807 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6808 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6809 			      gfp_t gfp);
6810 
6811 /**
6812  * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6813  *
6814  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6815  * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6816  *
6817  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6818  * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6819  *          information.
6820  * @len: frame length in bytes
6821  */
6822 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6823 			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6824 			      int len);
6825 
6826 /**
6827  * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6828  *
6829  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6830  * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6831  *
6832  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6833  * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6834  * @len: frame length in bytes
6835  */
6836 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6837 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6838 			      int len);
6839 /**
6840  * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6841  *
6842  * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6843  * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6844  * hardware or firmware.
6845  *
6846  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6847  * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6848  */
6849 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6850 
6851 /**
6852  * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
6853  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6854  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6855  *
6856  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6857  *
6858  * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
6859  */
6860 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6861 						  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6862 
6863 /**
6864  * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
6865  *	probe response template.
6866  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6867  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6868  *
6869  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6870  *
6871  * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
6872  */
6873 struct sk_buff *
6874 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6875 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6876 
6877 /**
6878  * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
6879  * collision.
6880  *
6881  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6882  * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
6883  *	aware of.
6884  */
6885 void
6886 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6887 				       u64 color_bitmap);
6888 
6889 /**
6890  * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
6891  *
6892  * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
6893  * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
6894  *
6895  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
6896  */
ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff * skb)6897 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
6898 {
6899 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
6900 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
6901 
6902 	return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
6903 	       ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
6904 }
6905 
6906 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6907